vArranger - User contributions [en]

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:55:47Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels.
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters:''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.
 
 
'''Warning:''' The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:54:35Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels.
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters:''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.
 
'''Warning:''' The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:52:35Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels.
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.
 
'''Warning:''' The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has now intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:49:49Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels.
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.
 
'''Warning:''' The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has now intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:43:02Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels.
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:36:26Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:35:05Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:34:44Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:34:11Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:32:31Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:32:00Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global parameterizable equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
''' Workarround for change parameters''' Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set SD1000 parameters into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows not to save the parameters for each song.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:16:43Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:15:34Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:13:02Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]
 
The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:11:02Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 DSP.jpeg |560px | center]]
 
The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
'''The global section (red)''' allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
'''The DSP section (yellow)''' allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
'''The track link section (blue)''' allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:09:09Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 DSP.jpeg |760px | center]]
 
The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
The global section (red) allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
The DSP section (yellow) allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
Thetrack link section (blue)<\/> allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T16:06:50Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 DSP.jpg |760px | center]]
 
The DSP owns two DSP's and allows to send two different effects to each of the xtracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb, chorus and has a global pramtrizebal equalizer
 
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters.
 
The global section (red)<\br> allows to set the Master levekls for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.
 
The DSP section (yellow)<\b> allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each af this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets. It is recommended to use this presets.
 
Into track link section (blue)<\b>
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg

2018-03-16T15:44:52Z

Tthoms:

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T15:14:09Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T15:13:39Z

Tthoms: /* EFFECTS */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |560px | center]]

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T15:12:44Z

Tthoms: /* Ketron SD1000 Effects */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.
 
<image

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg

2018-03-16T15:11:03Z

Tthoms:

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T15:01:57Z

Tthoms: /* EFFECTS */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====
If in the Midi ports menu the the SD1000 is selected in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T14:57:41Z

Tthoms: /* EFFECTS */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?
 

=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T14:56:34Z

Tthoms: /* MASTER */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
 
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects.
 
=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2018-03-16T14:56:03Z

Tthoms: /* MASTER */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:



{| class=wikitable style="margin: auto;"
! MIDI Input || '''''vA2''''' Feature || Notes and Observations
|-
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:
* MIDI notes to be played by the LEFT part.
* MIDI Notes to be played by the RIGHT part.
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 2 || MIDI Instrument MIDI Controller
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.
*If Play Notes is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by '''''vA2'''''.
*If Play Notes is not checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..
|-
| Optional &lowast; MIDI IN 3 || MIDI Controller
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.
|-
| Optional JOYSTICK || Commands
| This option allows '''''vA2''''' to receive external commands from a USB connected device
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.
|}

&lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports.

KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate -
these lights can be controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the KORG website) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3'rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules.
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====

===== Create A Chordsheet =====
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. '''''vA2''''' then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen.
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat.
* By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (A, B, C, D, Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For each style and for each of its sections are show its style name, and in brackets, its duration in measures.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on measure, the data my be set the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button '''PLAY SONG'''.
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking '''TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
* '''INSERT''' one or more measures (four measures in the example above).
* '''SELECT FROM ->''' this measure to another measure '''<-TO SELECT'''.
* '''SELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''DESELECT ALL''' measures in the grid.
* '''COPY''' your selection to the clipboard.
* '''PASTE''' your selection from the clipboard.
* '''PASTE '?' TIMES''' your selection several times.

[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
* '''DELETE''' the selection or measure.
* '''CLEAR''' the selection or measure.
* '''TRANSPOSE -''' or '''TRANSPOSE +''' the selection or measure.
* '''PLAY FROM HERE''' plays the accompaniment from this measure
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions require a confirmation like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures. 
Save your song by using the '''SAVE SONG'' button, setting appropriate song name an location. The '''SONG CHORDS''' option is already checked, so press the '''SAVE''' button to finish.

You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on '''EXPORT TO MIDIFILE'''. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.
 
 

===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====
 
'''SONG CHORDS''' can be used in another manner. Enter some chords into the '''SONG CHORD''' window, for example: C Am F G. Then close the window. Launch '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D) there is a button '''vRIFF'''. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule:
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects.
 
=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity.
 

== the vARRANGER ² icon ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 

== PANIC ==
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.
This red button sends the command "ALL NOTES OFF" on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.
 
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can't arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 

== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons.

A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for '''''vA2'''''.
 
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the "MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP" function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.
 
Then, a first press of the "Esc" key will minimize the '''''vA2''''' window, the second press restores the '''''vA2''''' window to the screen.

Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the '''''vA2''''' window from normal to full screen and vice versa.
 
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.

9. APPENDIX

2014-10-29T18:01:14Z

Tthoms:

Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations '''''vA2'''''

'''Good practice example: multiple controller units and different scene instances
 
What is the best way to have two different instances/scenes of controllers set up. Ie. I have Two different kontroller units but need same controlls over VA. Depending on the gig I will use one or the other controller units. (not both together)
Ie. for set up scene ONE = NanoKontroller with midi accordion.
alternative
Set up TWO = Roland midi controller keyboard with accordion
 
Close to the vArranger2.exe program, you have a folder called vArrangerData. Inside this folder, there is a file called vArranger2.ini. Everything about your controllers are inside this file. So, You can set the midi ports and controllers for the accordion setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-ACC.ini You can set the midi ports and controllers for the keyboard setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-KEYB.ini Then before running vArranger2, decide witch one you want to use and rename it as vArranger2.ini
A good solution.
 
This again shows the brilliant and ongoing versatility of vArranger. However you got me thinking if I could avoid the renaming. Rather than the slight effort of renaming the "ini" files for different set ups - here is a suggestion.If I created two new FOLDERS (not files) within the vArrangerdata folder and as you suggested I will name one FOLDER "vArranger2-ACC.ini" and the other FOLDER "vArranger2-KEYB.ini".
In each folder I would have the relevant version of the same name "ini" file for each controllers set up option.
I would then simply drag the ini file out of the relevant ini folders into the vArranger data folder as needed for each set up. So all that I will need to do is drag the "ini" file as needed depending on my set up for that gig.
I am aware that having two "ini" files with the same name will require greater care to avoid confusion.

Note : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to '''''vA2''''' are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed)
 
 
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 

[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2014-10-05T17:04:37Z

Tthoms: /* OPTIONS */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose or MIDI interfaces that will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:

[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px | center]]

* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input.
KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate,
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the website
KORG) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave unchecked the box, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules.
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
'''SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:'''
 
'''Creating chordsheet'''
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen.
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time.
By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (ABCD Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For a given and for each of its sections style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on the time of the measurement, the agreements between the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
Once the chord grid input '''PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) 
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM ->] untilthe other measure [<-TO SELECT] 
Select All [SELECT ALL] and 
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] 
Copy selection [COPY] 
Paste Selection [PASTE] 
Paste the selection several times [PASTE '?' TIMES] 
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection 
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection 
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] 
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] 
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on.
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG
CHORDS box already checked!
 
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.
 
 
'''The vRIFF function:'''
 
The new function '''SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F G. .. then closes the window: Launch''' '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD) There is a button called '''vRIFF. Clicking it changes color and hear the now controlled by the series of agreements previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects.
 
=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== ICONS MIDI ACTIVITY ==
Three icons symbolizing the three MIDI inputs possible materialize MIDI activity on each.
 
== vARRANGER ² ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 
== PANIC ==
This red button sends information ALL NOTE OFF on all MIDI channels. He notes that off after a problem as a MIDI cable disconnected, remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE ==
Works like icons reduction Windows window.
A click on the minimize button of the window also frees momentarily keys assigned to PC '''''vA2''''' For example, it is advisable, in CONTROLLERS, assign the "reduce" the PC Escape (Esc) key
function.
Thus, a first pressing "Esc" reduced the window, the second support vA2 returns to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window '''''vA2''''' from normal to full screen and vice versa. In Normal mode, you can also move and resize the window

5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM

2014-10-05T17:04:04Z

Tthoms: /* OPTIONS */

== OPTIONS ==

[[File:Fig2.jpg |640px | center ]]

This window (Fig3) shows the available options for the vA2. It allows to configure midi ports, controllers, song chords,Master, Arabic scale. The effects is only available in the yamaha mode. 
[[File:Fig3.jpg |280px | center ]]

=== MIDI PORTS ===
This window allows you to choose or MIDI interfaces that will be active in IN and OUT from
those connected to the computer.
 
 
'''''vA2''''' can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:

[[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px | center]]

* Provided that the MIDI interface is provided with several MIDI IN input.
KEYBOARD MODE: By default '''''vA2''''' KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL
1 (Fig. 4)

[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]] 
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selectingMIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right),the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). 

[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] 

Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed
This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example) 
'''MIDI LED FEEDBACK'''
Some MIDI controllers such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2have buttons that can illuminate,
these lights can beings controlled via MIDI. 
'''VIDEO:''' http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE
This option gives you a visual acknowledgment without having to look at the computer screen.
For example, we assign 4 buttons variations ABCD arranger, button change during turns.
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS.
In the figure below is selected in the MIDI controller MIDI IN 2nd by checking the LED feedback
box this MIDI (Fig. 6) entrance, you can choose theMIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)
 
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]
 
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]
 
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for
the KORG nanoKONTROL2 the KORG Kontrol Editor program (available on the website
KORG) and select is used: 
- CONTROL MODE = CC 
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL
 
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]
 
Similarly, for each button, choose:
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127
 
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]
 
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication,Write Scene Data.
 
'''Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way'''
 
 
'''MIDI OUT:''' 
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module.
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT.
 
 
Note : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER
 
 
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers.
GM2 mode is recommended in all other cases, such as the Hypersonic 2 VST or other GM compatible VST.
 
 
'''SYNCRO OUT:'''
 
Ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.
 
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so he agrees to synchronize to an external MIDI clock.
 
With this option '''''vA2''''' can play in rhythm with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer, drum machine, etc..
 
 
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave unchecked the box, because it sends continuous MIDI messages.
 
 
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with '''''vA2''''' By selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3.
This option allows for example to double the polyphony of sound modules Ketron adding other modules.
START button to confirm the settings during initialinstallation or change thereafter.
 

=== CONTROLLERS ===
This window allows you to manage the behavior of '''''vA2''''' against external controls, they are:
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...)
 
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]
 
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)
 
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]
 
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK)
 
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]
 
To assign a function to an external controller, we choose first the desired among those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button. All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session.
 
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]
 
'''Example:''' Here, various functions '''''vA2''''' controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.
 

Note: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of '''''vA2''''' It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function.
 
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]
 
At the bottom of the window CONTROLLERS (OPTIONS /, scroll MIDI events entering
vArranger (outside of active sensing messages and midi clock). This can be useful to know what instruments and MIDI controllers send.
 
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]
 

=== SONG CHORDS ===
 
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]
 
'''SONG CHORDS 2 in 1 function that allows you to:'''
 
'''Creating chordsheet'''
 
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS,
SONG CHORDS. It then enters the chord grid of the song on the screen.
By clicking on a measure, we enter the agreement for the selected time.
By clicking on the upper part of the measure, one can select a variation from those of the current style (ABCD Main, Fill, Intro, Ending.). For a given and for each of its sections style, duration in number of measurements is shown in brackets.
 
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]
 
Once you click on the time of the measurement, the agreements between the mouse, or by playing a MIDI instrument or by typing the letters on the keys ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the '''MENU CONTROLLERS'''.
 
Once the chord grid input '''PLAY SONG can listen the full accompaniment created. It is
also possible to implement the SONG CHORDS by semitone without re-entering
data, simply by acting on TRANSPOSE + or -'''.
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything.
 
Right-click in a time of one measurement opens the following pop-up window:
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]
 
From this window you can:
 
Insert [INSERT] one or more steps (4 steps in the example above) 
Select from this measurement [SELECT FROM ->] untilthe other measure [<-TO SELECT] 
Select All [SELECT ALL] and 
Deselect all [DESELECT ALL] 
Copy selection [COPY] 
Paste Selection [PASTE] 
Paste the selection several times [PASTE '?' TIMES] 
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Remove selection [DELETE], or measure if no selection 
Clear information in the selection [CLEAR], or to the extent if no selection 
Transpose only selected measures [TRANSPOSE-TRANSPOSE +] 
Play SONG CHORDS for this measurement [PLAY FROM HERE] 
 
Note :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for thismeasurement, the time during the game is the salmon color as below in 3/4 time:
 
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]
 
Some actions are validated by a confirmation message like this:
 
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The insertion of data as 24 extends the edit windowup to 48 steps and so on.
The SAVE button in the SONG SONG SONG CHORDS launches SAVE window with SONG
CHORDS box already checked!
 
It is possible to create midi accompaniments very quickly and easily by clicking on EXPORT TO MIDIFILE to generate the MIDI file, it is possible to open it in any professional MIDI sequencer, and from this base to simplify work: add VST audio tracks of ... and burn your CD.
 
 
'''The vRIFF function:'''
 
The new function '''SONG CHORDS can be used in another manière.On some agreements between the SONG CHORD window. For example: C Am F G. .. then closes the window: Launch''' '''''vA2''''' (START) and play some chords.
 
Above the four variations of the style (Main ABCD) There is a button called '''vRIFF. Clicking it changes color and hear the now controlled by the series of agreements previously returned accompaniment.''' 
 
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button:
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]
 
 
Note : Right click on the button shows vRIFF SONG CHORDSediting window.
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the '''vRIFF cheek'''.
 
Can regain control of the fix to ANY TIME by clicking on the button '''vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF thenresumes its gray).'''
 
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.
 
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu.
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style.
 
 
Features :
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG.
 
Once the chord grid entry, you can try other styles on the same grid by pressing the button vRIFF.
 

=== MIDI EVENTS ===
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.
 
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]
 
=== MASTER ===
'''BASS BOOST : ''' Adjusts the equalizer by selecting the correct frequency and gain. Asterisks
indicate default values.
 
'''MIDI INPUT GAIN: '''MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively.
 
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument,
if the permits.
 
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]
 
'''MY SD2/SD4 Freezes'''
 
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages.
 
Note : This option is checked by default, appears if a SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS).
 
If your SD2 does not crash when reading midi test-it is better to shoot and all the midi messages are sent.
 
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html
 
'''CHORD RECOGNITION THRESHOLD VELOCITY : ''' Ability to filter the notes low intensity to avoid unwanted chord changes. This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists because unwanted
notes are easily sent by open strings touched.
 

=== EFFECTS ===
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]
 
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects.
 
=== ARABIC SCALE ===
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original
intonation.
 
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]
 
NB: To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE
 

== ICONS MIDI ACTIVITY ==
Three icons symbolizing the three MIDI inputs possible materialize MIDI activity on each.
 
== vARRANGER ² ==
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear:
 
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]
 
== PANIC ==
This red button sends information ALL NOTE OFF on all MIDI channels. He notes that off after a problem as a MIDI cable disconnected, remain audible.
 
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== TIME ==
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h
 
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]
 
== ICONS REDUCTION / CLOSE ==
Works like icons reduction Windows window.
A click on the minimize button of the window also frees momentarily keys assigned to PC '''''vA2''''' For example, it is advisable, in CONTROLLERS, assign the "reduce" the PC Escape (Esc) key
function.
Thus, a first pressing "Esc" reduced the window, the second support vA2 returns to the screen. Double-click the wallpaper brings the window '''''vA2''''' from normal to full screen and vice versa. In Normal mode, you can also move and resize the window

File:Fig3.jpg

2014-10-05T17:00:45Z

Tthoms: Tthoms uploaded a new version of "File:Fig3.jpg"

File:Fig2.jpg

2014-10-05T17:00:20Z

Tthoms: Tthoms uploaded a new version of "File:Fig2.jpg"

File:Fig1Interfaceva.jpg

2014-10-05T17:00:04Z

Tthoms: Tthoms uploaded a new version of "File:Fig1Interfaceva.jpg"

9. APPENDIX

2014-10-05T10:17:46Z

Tthoms:

Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations '''''vA2'''''

Note : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to '''''vA2''''' are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed)
 
 
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 

[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]

9. APPENDIX

2014-10-05T10:17:19Z

Tthoms:

Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations '''''vA2'''''
 
 
Note : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to '''''vA2''''' are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed)
 
 
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 

[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]
 
 

----
 
 
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]

5.12. STATUS ARRANGER

2014-10-05T10:16:19Z

Tthoms: /* FADE */

== STATUS ARRANGEUR ==
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
=== START ===
• Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn green and the screen changes to STOP. The measurement indicator is activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low.
 
• Arranger running, pressing STOP stops immediately arranger (right or left click). The button returns to its orange color and screen changes START (ready for a new start).
 
=== TEMPO ===
By successively pressing the "+" and "-" keys, it is possible to increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250 minimum for the maximum. An arc of orange-red circle whose opening is proportional to the value of TEMPO provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, sliding the mouse along a vertical axis. In addition, a first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:
 
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The appearance of a small padlock in the center anda yellow circle indicates periphery GEL TEMPO. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO. A second double-click resets the tempo indicator in its original definition and cancels the TEMPO LOCK function
 
 
Note : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo, time clicking with the right mouse button on the wheel TEMPO button.
 
 
In OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, you can assign a key to the TAP TEMPO function.
 

=== SYNC ===
This Framework offers two options:
 
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px | center ]]
 
 
'''Note:''' These two options are not mutually exclusive, checked simultaneously '''''vA2''''' play only when notes to it from the LEFT section.
 

=== COUNT IN ===
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger.
 
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure.
 
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks.
 
=== FADE ===
• The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.
 
• The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped.
 
 
Note : The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar.
 
 

=== HOLD ===
The HOLD function when activated can remember the last agreement received in his LEFT part. Practically, with the arranger on, it keeps the activation of all the backing tracks, bass and drums even if the agreements of the left hand are not required. Otherwise, only the battery is active without agreements received.
 
All ARRANGEUR STATUS commands are assignable by theOPTIONS / CONTROLLERS then
TRANSPORT menu.

5.12. STATUS ARRANGER

2014-10-05T10:15:41Z

Tthoms: /* TEMPO */

== STATUS ARRANGEUR ==
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
=== START ===
• Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn green and the screen changes to STOP. The measurement indicator is activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low.
 
• Arranger running, pressing STOP stops immediately arranger (right or left click). The button returns to its orange color and screen changes START (ready for a new start).
 
=== TEMPO ===
By successively pressing the "+" and "-" keys, it is possible to increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250 minimum for the maximum. An arc of orange-red circle whose opening is proportional to the value of TEMPO provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, sliding the mouse along a vertical axis. In addition, a first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:
 
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The appearance of a small padlock in the center anda yellow circle indicates periphery GEL TEMPO. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO. A second double-click resets the tempo indicator in its original definition and cancels the TEMPO LOCK function
 
 
Note : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo, time clicking with the right mouse button on the wheel TEMPO button.
 
 
In OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, you can assign a key to the TAP TEMPO function.
 

=== SYNC ===
This Framework offers two options:
 
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px | center ]]
 
 
'''Note:''' These two options are not mutually exclusive, checked simultaneously '''''vA2''''' play only when notes to it from the LEFT section.
 

=== COUNT IN ===
Arranger Off, like a drummer, this function is a count of chopsticks on the quarter of a measure heard before the start of the arranger.
 
Arranger On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART, this function immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure.
 
Functions COUNT IN / RESTART are enabled with right or left clicks.
 
=== FADE ===
• The arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade output fromthe zero level to the noise level programmed. When the noise level reaches the screen is programmed exchange FADE OUT and the button returns to gray.
 
• The arranger START, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the noise level reaches zero the screen changes FADE IN, the button becomes gray and the Arranger is stopped.
 
'''Note:''' The behavior of the FADE function is identical toa MIDI sequence or Kar.
 
=== HOLD ===
The HOLD function when activated can remember the last agreement received in his LEFT part. Practically, with the arranger on, it keeps the activation of all the backing tracks, bass and drums even if the agreements of the left hand are not required. Otherwise, only the battery is active without agreements received.
 
All ARRANGEUR STATUS commands are assignable by theOPTIONS / CONTROLLERS then
TRANSPORT menu.

5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER

2014-10-05T10:14:37Z

Tthoms: /* ENDING */

== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGEUR ==
The control of the arranger comes in different aspects, depending on the origin of STYLE
loaded.
 
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
=== INTRO ===
By default, no INTRO is selected '''''vA2''''' provides up to three reasons for the introduction of simpler (No. 1 or A) to the richest (3, C), the length of the introductory units is variable depending on the style but never less than one degree. It appears in the FRAME (blue horizontal thermometer).
 
Arranger Off, you select the intro pattern (1, 2 or3), the button turns red, pressing START starts arranger INTRO preselected to bind the A CHANGE CHANGE or any other previously selected
.
 
It is possible during the game to a replay INTRO, you only have to click on the reason for his choice.
 

=== CHANGE ===
'''''vA2''''' offers according to the origin of the style variations up to 4 A, B, C, D or RIFF and up to 5 FILL IN. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple "A" to the richest "D" some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of change "D".
 
RIFF is a pre recorded musical phrase of several measures. Up to 32 steps, its length is indicated by the blue horizontal thermometer part A, the harmonic grid rotates in the tone of the recent agreement struck before entering this variation. This feature is very popular for enhancing the musician's improvisation on a given grid.
 
The change over is indicated by the blue color of the button.
 

=== FILL IN ===
'''''vA2''''' provides up to three reasons for FILL IN BREAK more for Ketron styles and up to 5 FILL
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL is selected, the buttons change color upon selection.
Arranger Off, selecting a fill / BREAK will start the arranger on the FILL / BREAK preset from its
start.
 
The framework is provided with a button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which turns red when selected. This automatically starts a fill when changing CHANGE according to the following arrangement:
 
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]]
 

=== ENDING ===
'''''vA2''''' provides up to four reasons for terminating the simplest to the most wealthy, the length of the reasons for terminating the style varies but never less than one degree. It appears in the FRAME (blue horizontal thermometer).
 
 
Note : If you start the arranger on ENDING, '''''vA2''''' will stop at the end of the pattern end.
 
 
All commands can be assigned by the arranger OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS then CONDUCTOR menu.

=== MARKERS ===
When '''''vA2''''' reads a sequence, the control panel of the arranger becomes bulletin board MARKERS which look like.
 
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
A marker is used for storing a MIDI file in a precise position.
 
'''''vA2''''' ''' display the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. Clicking on a marker
buttons, reading the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.'''
 
If the MIDI file is being played, the position change will take place at the end of the measurement, for a smooth transition.
 
This is very useful if you eg public requires additional chorus. You click on the marker Chorus, and at the end of the current measurement, a chorus will be chained perfectly.
 
In '''OPTIONS / CONTROLLERS, it is possible to assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, keys or PC ... (Section MARKERS).'''
 
 
It is also possible to use the functions assigned to CHANGE CHANGE UP and DOWN arranger keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several times in a row.
 
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use an editor of MIDI files and name tags, so that they contain: Intro Intro 1 or 2 or 3 or Intro or Ending Ending 1 Ending 2 or 3 or 4 or Ending Main Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.Par example, if the marker is called "Main C" or "Solo Guitar Hand C", you can go to the position of the marker by pressing the button or pedal
assigned to variation 3 arranger.

5.10. MIXER

2014-10-05T10:13:02Z

Tthoms: /* SEND TO MIDI */

== GROUP VOICE ==
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.
 
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]
 

== SECTION SOUND EDIT ==
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow.
 
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added:
 
A play area:
 
'''From Key ''' and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.).
 
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key).
 
Particular velocity:
 
''' Velocity FROM ''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to "light" the maximum is "Sforzando."
 
''' Velocity To''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM.
 
A change octave.
 
A transposition in semitones.
 
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played
 
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND
 
Distinctive Ways '''DRUM''' and '''PERC''' 
 
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new
percussion own settings:
 
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER
 
 
Particulars of the Track '''BASS'''
 
 
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP

== SAVE SOUND ==
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]
and "SOUND ..." The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND:
 
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]
 
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex.
 

== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections:
 
Here, right click ACCOMP4:
 
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]

=== SEND TO MIDI ===
This menu allows you to route MIDI track this information to multiple MIDI outputs, these
choices are not mutually exclusive.
 
 
Note : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.
 
 

=== SOUND EDIT ... ===
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT
 
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===
This command displays summary screen settings current style for each track, and each
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)
 
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]
 
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]
 
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups:
 
The first track named '''SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE ''' for the use of a
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127)
 
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The third path named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The fourth track named MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.
 
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony,
in other words, the number of notes "ON" sent to the sound module. This allows for example,
whether '''''vA2''''' is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN.
 
The first group of effects named FX1-REVERB can select a reverb type from eight types of
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available.
 
By clicking on the bottom of the window '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without applying the
changes.
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16.
 
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to
be applied to different tracks '''''vA2''''' Eight different types are available including an OFF for all
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without
applying the changes.

5.10. MIXER

2014-10-05T10:12:40Z

Tthoms: /* CONTEXT MENU TRACK */

== GROUP VOICE ==
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.
 
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]
 

== SECTION SOUND EDIT ==
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow.
 
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added:
 
A play area:
 
'''From Key ''' and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.).
 
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key).
 
Particular velocity:
 
''' Velocity FROM ''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to "light" the maximum is "Sforzando."
 
''' Velocity To''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM.
 
A change octave.
 
A transposition in semitones.
 
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played
 
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND
 
Distinctive Ways '''DRUM''' and '''PERC''' 
 
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new
percussion own settings:
 
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER
 
 
Particulars of the Track '''BASS'''
 
 
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP

== SAVE SOUND ==
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]
and "SOUND ..." The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND:
 
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]
 
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex.
 

== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections:
 
Here, right click ACCOMP4:
 
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]

=== SEND TO MIDI ===
This menu allows you to route MIDI track this information to multiple MIDI outputs, these
choices are not mutually exclusive.
 
Note : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.
 

=== SOUND EDIT ... ===
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT
 
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===
This command displays summary screen settings current style for each track, and each
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)
 
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]
 
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]
 
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups:
 
The first track named '''SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE ''' for the use of a
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127)
 
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The third path named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The fourth track named MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.
 
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony,
in other words, the number of notes "ON" sent to the sound module. This allows for example,
whether '''''vA2''''' is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN.
 
The first group of effects named FX1-REVERB can select a reverb type from eight types of
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available.
 
By clicking on the bottom of the window '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without applying the
changes.
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16.
 
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to
be applied to different tracks '''''vA2''''' Eight different types are available including an OFF for all
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without
applying the changes.

5.10. MIXER

2014-10-05T10:11:13Z

Tthoms: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */

== GROUP VOICE ==
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.
 
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]
 

== SECTION SOUND EDIT ==
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow.
 
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added:
 
A play area:
 
'''From Key ''' and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.).
 
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key).
 
Particular velocity:
 
''' Velocity FROM ''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to "light" the maximum is "Sforzando."
 
''' Velocity To''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM.
 
A change octave.
 
A transposition in semitones.
 
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played
 
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND
 
Distinctive Ways '''DRUM''' and '''PERC''' 
 
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new
percussion own settings:
 
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER
 
 
Particulars of the Track '''BASS'''
 
 
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP

== SAVE SOUND ==
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]
and "SOUND ..." The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND:
 
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]
 
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex.
 

== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections:
 
Here, right click ACCOMP4:
 
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]

=== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ===
This menu allows you to route MIDI track this information to multiple MIDI outputs, these
choices are not mutually exclusive.
 
'''Note:''' It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.
 
=== SOUND EDIT ... ===
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT
 
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===
This command displays summary screen settings current style for each track, and each
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)
 
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]
 
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]
 
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups:
 
The first track named '''SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE ''' for the use of a
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127)
 
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The third path named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The fourth track named MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.
 
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony,
in other words, the number of notes "ON" sent to the sound module. This allows for example,
whether '''''vA2''''' is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN.
 
The first group of effects named FX1-REVERB can select a reverb type from eight types of
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available.
 
By clicking on the bottom of the window '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without applying the
changes.
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16.
 
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to
be applied to different tracks '''''vA2''''' Eight different types are available including an OFF for all
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without
applying the changes.

5.10. MIXER

2014-10-05T10:10:36Z

Tthoms: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */

== GROUP VOICE ==
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.
 
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]
 

== SECTION SOUND EDIT ==
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow.
 
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added:
 
A play area:
 
'''From Key ''' and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.).
 
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key).
 
Particular velocity:
 
''' Velocity FROM ''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to "light" the maximum is "Sforzando."
 
''' Velocity To''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM.
 
A change octave.
 
A transposition in semitones.
 
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played
 
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND
 
Distinctive Ways '''DRUM''' and '''PERC''' 
 
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new
percussion own settings:
 
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER
 
 
Particulars of the Track '''BASS'''
 
 

Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP
 

== SAVE SOUND ==
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]
and "SOUND ..." The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND:
 
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]
 
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex.
 

== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections:
 
Here, right click ACCOMP4:
 
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]

=== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ===
This menu allows you to route MIDI track this information to multiple MIDI outputs, these
choices are not mutually exclusive.
 
'''Note:''' It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.
 
=== SOUND EDIT ... ===
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT
 
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===
This command displays summary screen settings current style for each track, and each
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)
 
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]
 
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]
 
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups:
 
The first track named '''SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE ''' for the use of a
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127)
 
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The third path named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The fourth track named MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.
 
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony,
in other words, the number of notes "ON" sent to the sound module. This allows for example,
whether '''''vA2''''' is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN.
 
The first group of effects named FX1-REVERB can select a reverb type from eight types of
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available.
 
By clicking on the bottom of the window '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without applying the
changes.
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16.
 
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to
be applied to different tracks '''''vA2''''' Eight different types are available including an OFF for all
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without
applying the changes.

5.10. MIXER

2014-10-05T10:09:44Z

Tthoms: /* SECTION SOUND EDIT */

== GROUP VOICE ==
This group has 16 voices, each voice can be either on a runway or arranger on a track MIDI or KAR read file.
 
[[File:Tabelle7.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
[[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8.jpg | 640px | center]]
[[File:Tabelle8a.jpg | 640px | center]]
 

== SECTION SOUND EDIT ==
Double-click on one of 16 tracks opens the SOUND EDIT window. Once the open window, a single click on other tracks, update the SOUND EDITwindow.
 
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
When editing tracks RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE LEFT and 1, 2, 3 can be made simple or more complex presets. The above parameters is added:
 
A play area:
 
'''From Key ''' and Key To allow you to select the range of action, we define KEY From notes by clicking on the displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (the number will be displayed.).
 
We define Key To note (which may not be less than From Key) by clicking on the
displayed value and then play the keyboard the desired note (which may not be less than From Key).
 
Particular velocity:
 
''' Velocity FROM ''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to "light" the maximum is "Sforzando."
 
''' Velocity To''' Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value can not be less than Velocity FROM.
 
A change octave.
 
A transposition in semitones.
 
These special lanes and 2nd RIGHT and LEFT VOICE allow for example to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played
 
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
The parameters are set you can save your work in SAVE SOUND
 
Distinctive Ways '''DRUM''' and '''PERC''' 
 
By double-clicking on the track or PERC DRUM SOUND EDIT window appears with new
percussion own settings:
 
[[File:Fig68.jpg | 720px | center]]
 
These two channels have a DRUM MIXER
 
Particulars of the Track '''BASS'''
 
Ability to save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the ReleaseTime. You can then save this setting in CONFIG SAVE STARTUP
 

== SAVE SOUND ==
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the button [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]]
and "SOUND ..." The following parameters are stored in SAVE RIGHT SOUND:
 
[[File:Tabelle9.jpg |480px | center]]
 
By combining up to 5 tracks (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE) it is easy to create new sounds complex.
 

== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==
Right click on a track displays a context menu thatcallows the following selections:
 
Here, right click ACCOMP4:
 
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]

=== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ===
This menu allows you to route MIDI track this information to multiple MIDI outputs, these
choices are not mutually exclusive.
 
'''Note:''' It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.
 
=== SOUND EDIT ... ===
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT
 
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===
This command displays summary screen settings current style for each track, and each
variation. (Compatibility Ketron styles to come)
 
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]
 
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]
 
This group has 4 channels and adjustment effects two groups:
 
The first track named '''SONG, we read a sequence or an audio file, or STYLE ''' for the use of a
style rule by moving the cursor vertical level of the sequence, or the audio file type (0-127)
 
The second channel named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor LEFT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the display option [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to associate a bar SOUNDS MY STYLE. A right-click displays
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The third path named in [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] adjusted by means of the vertical level of the cursor RIGHT section (0 to 127). This path can be selected, which causes the column display stamps allowing choice. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4.
 
The fourth track named MAST rule acting on the vertical [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] rule acting on the vertical slider overall output level (MASTER) from 0 to 127.
 
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is of polyphony,
in other words, the number of notes "ON" sent to the sound module. This allows for example,
whether '''''vA2''''' is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN.
 
The first group of effects named FX1-REVERB can select a reverb type from eight types of
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available.
 
By clicking on the bottom of the window '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without applying the
changes.
The maximum level is adjustable reverb chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16.
 
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to
be applied to different tracks '''''vA2''''' Eight different types are available including an OFF for all
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow '''''vA2''''' It clears the combo box without
applying the changes.

5.9. MY SONGS

2014-10-05T10:07:54Z

Tthoms: /* SAVE */

== MY SONGS MENUE ==
MY SONGS part is very useful because it allows performance to present on the screen all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
This framework contains 12 labels or 11 banks over a navigation arrow for exceeding the number of banks.
 
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)
 
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once the changes are complete, it is recommended that you click 'Refresh' to refresh the display.
 
Files can be:
 
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by '''''vA2'''''
 
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*. Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory "son" of the SONGS folder that named "SCORE" and it bears the same name.
 
The display PDF files requires downloading and installing a Plug In available for free here:
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html
 
In the case of use with a second screen, the partition will automatically appear on the latter which can be positioned in portrait example for comfort and readability mode. The score is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will.
 
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:
 
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
The left column shows the first 10 "SONGS" in the selected bank. By clicking with the right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice:
 
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]
 
'''MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name'''
 
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name '''
 
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)'''
 
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)'''
 
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG.
 
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information recorded by SAVE SONG, but also rock.jpg, ROCK1.JPG, ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory.
 
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once.
 
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory.
 
=== LOAD ===
This function allows you to load a compatible file '''''vA2''''' not contained in MY SONG
 
'''''vA2''''' recognizes the following formats:

STYLE
 
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
TEXT
 
TXT Text
RTF Rich Text Format

IMAGE
 
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF.

AUDIO
 
WAV, MP3, WMA

MIDI
 
MID, KAR

INS : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File
 

PDF : (Requires the free plugin)

=== SAVE ===
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reppear with options
following backup:
 
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
''' STARTUP CONFIG '''
This function allows you to find the same set of settings each time you start the program. A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time.
 
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]
 

 
Note : AUTOSTART MIDIFILE & MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press '''START.'''
 
 

'''SONG'''
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options:
 
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''SONG NAME: ''' Name given to this set of control ("bayonet" in the example)

'''FOLDER:''' Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.
 
 
Note : Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets + 2 digits) are invisible in '''''vA2 ''''' and are only used by the software to classify files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder '''''vA2''''' displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum.
 
 
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL.
 
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to "hardware" controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc.. Settings are stored for the SONG in progress . This function allows, if necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.
 

=== "Songs my Folder" ===
This feature allows the background, for example to create or delete rename folders in the
working directory '''''vA2''''' without leaving the software.
 
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 90px]] '''''vA2''''' displays the Windows file manager, prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2).
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation '''''vA2'''''
 
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
The working directory '''''vA2''''' '''(StyleROM1) defaults to 10 sub-folders whose names begin with two numbers in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in''' '''''vA2''''' '''Represent the fourth position in the bar MY SONGS, which allows a personalized classification of genres simply by changing the first two numbers while retaining brackets.'''
 
 
The number of sub folders is not limited by '''''vA2'''''
 
In the example in the figure above, the file '''DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.'''

When this subfolder is called SCORE (ref. 4) and contains files with the same name as the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE.

Another example can be seen that "hell" is two pages in jpg format.

 

=== "Refresh" ===
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by '''''vA2''''' without
needing to restart the software. This function is very useful when the user changes in the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory '''''vA2'''''.
 
=== "Search" ===
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file.
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and / or numbers) '''''vA2'''''
shows the occurrences
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received.
 
Pressing the assigned to the search function search function (SEARCH) button activates. A second press cancels the current search.
 

=== LYRICS ===
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined.
 
The popup window is floating and resizable.
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.

=== KARAOKE ===
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files.
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active.
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi
 
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]

5.9. MY SONGS

2014-10-05T10:07:24Z

Tthoms: /* SAVE */

== MY SONGS MENUE ==
MY SONGS part is very useful because it allows performance to present on the screen all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
This framework contains 12 labels or 11 banks over a navigation arrow for exceeding the number of banks.
 
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)
 
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once the changes are complete, it is recommended that you click 'Refresh' to refresh the display.
 
Files can be:
 
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by '''''vA2'''''
 
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*. Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory "son" of the SONGS folder that named "SCORE" and it bears the same name.
 
The display PDF files requires downloading and installing a Plug In available for free here:
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html
 
In the case of use with a second screen, the partition will automatically appear on the latter which can be positioned in portrait example for comfort and readability mode. The score is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will.
 
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:
 
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
The left column shows the first 10 "SONGS" in the selected bank. By clicking with the right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice:
 
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]
 
'''MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name'''
 
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name '''
 
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)'''
 
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)'''
 
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG.
 
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information recorded by SAVE SONG, but also rock.jpg, ROCK1.JPG, ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory.
 
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once.
 
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory.
 
=== LOAD ===
This function allows you to load a compatible file '''''vA2''''' not contained in MY SONG
 
'''''vA2''''' recognizes the following formats:

STYLE
 
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
TEXT
 
TXT Text
RTF Rich Text Format

IMAGE
 
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF.

AUDIO
 
WAV, MP3, WMA

MIDI
 
MID, KAR

INS : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File
 

PDF : (Requires the free plugin)

=== SAVE ===
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reppear with options
following backup:
 
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
''' STARTUP CONFIG '''
This function allows you to find the same set of settings each time you start the program. A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time.
 
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]
 

 
Note : AUTOSTART MIDIFILE & MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press '''START.'''
 
 

'''SONG'''
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options:
 
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''SONG NAME: ''' Name given to this set of control ("bayonet" in the example)

'''FOLDER:''' Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.
 
 
 Note</> : Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets + 2 digits) are invisible in '''''vA2 ''''' and are only used by the software to classify files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder '''''vA2''''' displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum.
 
 
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL.
 
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to "hardware" controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc.. Settings are stored for the SONG in progress . This function allows, if necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.
 

=== "Songs my Folder" ===
This feature allows the background, for example to create or delete rename folders in the
working directory '''''vA2''''' without leaving the software.
 
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 90px]] '''''vA2''''' displays the Windows file manager, prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2).
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation '''''vA2'''''
 
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
The working directory '''''vA2''''' '''(StyleROM1) defaults to 10 sub-folders whose names begin with two numbers in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in''' '''''vA2''''' '''Represent the fourth position in the bar MY SONGS, which allows a personalized classification of genres simply by changing the first two numbers while retaining brackets.'''
 
 
The number of sub folders is not limited by '''''vA2'''''
 
In the example in the figure above, the file '''DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.'''

When this subfolder is called SCORE (ref. 4) and contains files with the same name as the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE.

Another example can be seen that "hell" is two pages in jpg format.

 

=== "Refresh" ===
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by '''''vA2''''' without
needing to restart the software. This function is very useful when the user changes in the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory '''''vA2'''''.
 
=== "Search" ===
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file.
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and / or numbers) '''''vA2'''''
shows the occurrences
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received.
 
Pressing the assigned to the search function search function (SEARCH) button activates. A second press cancels the current search.
 

=== LYRICS ===
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined.
 
The popup window is floating and resizable.
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.

=== KARAOKE ===
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files.
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active.
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi
 
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]

5.9. MY SONGS

2014-10-05T10:06:24Z

Tthoms: /* SAVE */

== MY SONGS MENUE ==
MY SONGS part is very useful because it allows performance to present on the screen all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
This framework contains 12 labels or 11 banks over a navigation arrow for exceeding the number of banks.
 
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)
 
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once the changes are complete, it is recommended that you click 'Refresh' to refresh the display.
 
Files can be:
 
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by '''''vA2'''''
 
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*. Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory "son" of the SONGS folder that named "SCORE" and it bears the same name.
 
The display PDF files requires downloading and installing a Plug In available for free here:
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html
 
In the case of use with a second screen, the partition will automatically appear on the latter which can be positioned in portrait example for comfort and readability mode. The score is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will.
 
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:
 
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
The left column shows the first 10 "SONGS" in the selected bank. By clicking with the right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice:
 
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]
 
'''MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name'''
 
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name '''
 
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)'''
 
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)'''
 
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG.
 
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information recorded by SAVE SONG, but also rock.jpg, ROCK1.JPG, ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory.
 
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once.
 
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory.
 
=== LOAD ===
This function allows you to load a compatible file '''''vA2''''' not contained in MY SONG
 
'''''vA2''''' recognizes the following formats:

STYLE
 
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
TEXT
 
TXT Text
RTF Rich Text Format

IMAGE
 
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF.

AUDIO
 
WAV, MP3, WMA

MIDI
 
MID, KAR

INS : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File
 

PDF : (Requires the free plugin)

=== SAVE ===
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reppear with options
following backup:
 
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
''' STARTUP CONFIG '''
This function allows you to find the same set of settings each time you start the program. A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time.
 
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]
 

 
Note : AUTOSTART MIDIFILE & MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press '''START.'''
 
 

'''SONG'''
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options:
 
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''SONG NAME: ''' Name given to this set of control ("bayonet" in the example)

'''FOLDER:''' Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.
 
'''Note:''' Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets + 2 digits) are invisible in '''''vA2 ''''' and are only used by the software to classify files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder '''''vA2''''' displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum.
 
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL.
 
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to "hardware" controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc.. Settings are stored for the SONG in progress . This function allows, if necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.
 

=== "Songs my Folder" ===
This feature allows the background, for example to create or delete rename folders in the
working directory '''''vA2''''' without leaving the software.
 
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 90px]] '''''vA2''''' displays the Windows file manager, prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2).
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation '''''vA2'''''
 
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
The working directory '''''vA2''''' '''(StyleROM1) defaults to 10 sub-folders whose names begin with two numbers in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in''' '''''vA2''''' '''Represent the fourth position in the bar MY SONGS, which allows a personalized classification of genres simply by changing the first two numbers while retaining brackets.'''
 
 
The number of sub folders is not limited by '''''vA2'''''
 
In the example in the figure above, the file '''DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.'''

When this subfolder is called SCORE (ref. 4) and contains files with the same name as the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE.

Another example can be seen that "hell" is two pages in jpg format.

 

=== "Refresh" ===
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by '''''vA2''''' without
needing to restart the software. This function is very useful when the user changes in the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory '''''vA2'''''.
 
=== "Search" ===
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file.
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and / or numbers) '''''vA2'''''
shows the occurrences
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received.
 
Pressing the assigned to the search function search function (SEARCH) button activates. A second press cancels the current search.
 

=== LYRICS ===
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined.
 
The popup window is floating and resizable.
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.

=== KARAOKE ===
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files.
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active.
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi
 
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]

5.9. MY SONGS

2014-10-05T10:05:25Z

Tthoms: /* LOAD */

== MY SONGS MENUE ==
MY SONGS part is very useful because it allows performance to present on the screen all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]
 
This framework contains 12 labels or 11 banks over a navigation arrow for exceeding the number of banks.
 
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)
 
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once the changes are complete, it is recommended that you click 'Refresh' to refresh the display.
 
Files can be:
 
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by '''''vA2'''''
 
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*. Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory "son" of the SONGS folder that named "SCORE" and it bears the same name.
 
The display PDF files requires downloading and installing a Plug In available for free here:
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html
 
In the case of use with a second screen, the partition will automatically appear on the latter which can be positioned in portrait example for comfort and readability mode. The score is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will.
 
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:
 
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
The left column shows the first 10 "SONGS" in the selected bank. By clicking with the right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice:
 
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]
 
'''MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name'''
 
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG => select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name '''
 
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)'''
 
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)'''
 
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG.
 
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information recorded by SAVE SONG, but also rock.jpg, ROCK1.JPG, ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory.
 
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once.
 
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory.
 
=== LOAD ===
This function allows you to load a compatible file '''''vA2''''' not contained in MY SONG
 
'''''vA2''''' recognizes the following formats:

STYLE
 
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
TEXT
 
TXT Text
RTF Rich Text Format

IMAGE
 
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF.

AUDIO
 
WAV, MP3, WMA

MIDI
 
MID, KAR

INS : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File
 

PDF : (Requires the free plugin)

=== SAVE ===
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reppear with options
following backup:
 
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
''' STARTUP CONFIG '''
This function allows you to find the same set of settings each time you start the program. A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time.
 
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]
 
'''Note:''' AUTOSTART MIDIFILE & MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press '''START.'''
 
'''SONG'''
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options:
 
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
'''SONG NAME: ''' Name given to this set of control ("bayonet" in the example)

'''FOLDER:''' Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.
 
'''Note:''' Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets + 2 digits) are invisible in '''''vA2 ''''' and are only used by the software to classify files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder '''''vA2''''' displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum.
 
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL.
 
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to "hardware" controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc.. Settings are stored for the SONG in progress . This function allows, if necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.
 
=== "Songs my Folder" ===
This feature allows the background, for example to create or delete rename folders in the
working directory '''''vA2''''' without leaving the software.
 
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 90px]] '''''vA2''''' displays the Windows file manager, prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2).
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation '''''vA2'''''
 
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]
 
The working directory '''''vA2''''' '''(StyleROM1) defaults to 10 sub-folders whose names begin with two numbers in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in''' '''''vA2''''' '''Represent the fourth position in the bar MY SONGS, which allows a personalized classification of genres simply by changing the first two numbers while retaining brackets.'''
 
 
The number of sub folders is not limited by '''''vA2'''''
 
In the example in the figure above, the file '''DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.'''

When this subfolder is called SCORE (ref. 4) and contains files with the same name as the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE.

Another example can be seen that "hell" is two pages in jpg format.

 

=== "Refresh" ===
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by '''''vA2''''' without
needing to restart the software. This function is very useful when the user changes in the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory '''''vA2'''''.
 
=== "Search" ===
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file.
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and / or numbers) '''''vA2'''''
shows the occurrences
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received.
 
Pressing the assigned to the search function search function (SEARCH) button activates. A second press cancels the current search.
 

=== LYRICS ===
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined.
 
The popup window is floating and resizable.
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS
 
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.

=== KARAOKE ===
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files.
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active.
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi
 
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]

5.8. MY SOUNDS

2014-10-05T10:03:03Z

Tthoms: /* VOICE MENUES */

== VOICE MENUES ==
[[File:Fig46.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
This framework contains two lines of 10 stamps eachwill be called MY SOUNDS bars.
 
The top bar for RIGHT or right hand accordionists can contain up to 10 stamps chosen from the library VOICE stamps, these stamps are directly accessible at any time during the game for the lower LEFT or left hand bar ( agreements) for accordion has the same characteristics.
 
BY STYLE with activated (bar VOICE) 10 stamps and 10 stamps UPPER LOWER can be associated with each STYLE to be immediately available.
 
 
Note : See also paragraph GROUP MASTER / EFFECTS
 
 
To change the order in which the stamps are displayed in bars MY SOUNDS, simply drag the label stamp considered to a new location in the bar.
 
This window contains a LINK button that takes the color RED when the feature is enabled or gray otherwise.
 
[[File:Fig47.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
This great feature allows you to automatically change the timbre of the LEFT and RIGHT section depending on the variation in game The stamps will be the first four bars MY SOUNDS.
 
=== "Sounds Drop Here" ===
To fulfill MY SOUNDS, simply drag (s) stamp (s) selected (s) in the framework MY SOUNDS. It is also possible to load a stamp in MY SOUNDS selecting the label stamp selected and right click to perform ADD TO MY SOUNDS.
 
[[File:Fig49.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
=== Delete a stamp MY SOUNDS ===
To remove a stamp MY SOUNDS, right-click to remove the stamp shows a REMOVE menu. The stamp will only be removed from MY SOUNDS.
[[File:Fig49a.jpg | 240px | center]]

5.8. MY SOUNDS

2014-10-05T10:02:36Z

Tthoms: /* VOICE MENUES */

== VOICE MENUES ==
[[File:Fig46.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
This framework contains two lines of 10 stamps eachwill be called MY SOUNDS bars.
 
The top bar for RIGHT or right hand accordionists can contain up to 10 stamps chosen from the library VOICE stamps, these stamps are directly accessible at any time during the game for the lower LEFT or left hand bar ( agreements) for accordion has the same characteristics.
 
BY STYLE with activated (bar VOICE) 10 stamps and 10 stamps UPPER LOWER can be associated with each STYLE to be immediately available.
 
 
Note : See also paragraph GROUP MASTER / EFFECTS
 
To change the order in which the stamps are displayed in bars MY SOUNDS, simply drag the label stamp considered to a new location in the bar.
 
This window contains a LINK button that takes the color RED when the feature is enabled or gray otherwise.
 
[[File:Fig47.jpg | 640px | center]]
 
This great feature allows you to automatically change the timbre of the LEFT and RIGHT section depending on the variation in game The stamps will be the first four bars MY SOUNDS.
 
=== "Sounds Drop Here" ===
To fulfill MY SOUNDS, simply drag (s) stamp (s) selected (s) in the framework MY SOUNDS. It is also possible to load a stamp in MY SOUNDS selecting the label stamp selected and right click to perform ADD TO MY SOUNDS.
 
[[File:Fig49.jpg | 240px | center]]
 
=== Delete a stamp MY SOUNDS ===
To remove a stamp MY SOUNDS, right-click to remove the stamp shows a REMOVE menu. The stamp will only be removed from MY SOUNDS.
[[File:Fig49a.jpg | 240px | center]]

5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY

2014-10-05T10:01:14Z

Tthoms: /* PART1 */

== MAIN DISPLAY ==
This real-time display consists of two frames:
- A FRAMEWORK 1 top left, a FRAME 2 top right,
- A PLAYER A PLAYER framework and frame B, the active part is the one whose letter is
framed in white (here drive A is active).
 
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]
 

== PART1 ==
FRAME 1 shows the first line selected stamp on the left hand (L) for accordion and one on the left of the split point (split point) for pianists (SYNSTRGS1 in the example) and the group of stamps second line (STRINGS in the example).
 
The third line of the box indicates the MIDI configuration ACCORDION (Figure 25) or PIANIST
(KEYBOARD) (Figure 26).
 
[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]
 
In KEYBOARD MODE Split indicates the note sharing by clicking Split it is possible to adjust the split point (Fig. 27).
 
 
Note : In ACCORDION MODE, the keyboards right hand and left hand are physically separated, Split indicator does not appear, as moot.
 
 
The dashes in front of [ACCORDION] or C3 according Split MIDI mode indicates the agreement recognized and played by the arranger (U.S. encryption) when it is in operation.
 

== PART2 ==
The CADRE 2 displays the first line selected stamp on the right hand (R) for the accordion or the right of the split point for pianists (ROCK PIANO example in Fig. 25). The second line displays the group stamp RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example) and the third line (2nd) the tone of the second voice (VIOLA example in Fig. 25).
 
== THE PLAYER A ==
In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar).
The cursor on the name of the SONG is displayed in a yellow name tag STYLE used, for example:
 
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]
 

== THE PLAYER B ==
In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma).
 
The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.

5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY

2014-10-05T10:00:50Z

Tthoms: /* PART1 */

== MAIN DISPLAY ==
This real-time display consists of two frames:
- A FRAMEWORK 1 top left, a FRAME 2 top right,
- A PLAYER A PLAYER framework and frame B, the active part is the one whose letter is
framed in white (here drive A is active).
 
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]
 

== PART1 ==
FRAME 1 shows the first line selected stamp on the left hand (L) for accordion and one on the left of the split point (split point) for pianists (SYNSTRGS1 in the example) and the group of stamps second line (STRINGS in the example).
 
The third line of the box indicates the MIDI configuration ACCORDION (Figure 25) or PIANIST
(KEYBOARD) (Figure 26).
 
[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]
 
In KEYBOARD MODE Split indicates the note sharing by clicking Split it is possible to adjust the split point (Fig. 27).
 
 
Note : In ACCORDION MODE, the keyboards right hand and left hand are physically separated, Split indicator does not appear, as moot.
 The dashes in front of [ACCORDION] or C3 according Split MIDI mode indicates the agreement recognized and played by the arranger (U.S. encryption) when it is in operation.
 

== PART2 ==
The CADRE 2 displays the first line selected stamp on the right hand (R) for the accordion or the right of the split point for pianists (ROCK PIANO example in Fig. 25). The second line displays the group stamp RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example) and the third line (2nd) the tone of the second voice (VIOLA example in Fig. 25).
 
== THE PLAYER A ==
In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar).
The cursor on the name of the SONG is displayed in a yellow name tag STYLE used, for example:
 
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]
 

== THE PLAYER B ==
In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma).
 
The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.